2007 Saturn AURA Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick
reference.
SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registered
trademarks, and the name AURA is a trademark
of Saturn Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS
and GM are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners (English)
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15870405 A First Printing
©2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle to learn about the vehicle’s features
and controls. Pictures and words work together to
explain things.
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to
help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read
these cautions. If you do not, you or others could
be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not
do this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. A box with the word CAUTION is used to
tell about things that could hurt you or others if you
were to ignore the warning.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid
the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle
which use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the handle is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Move the handle up repeatedly to decrease
lumbar support. Move the handle down repeatedly
to increase lumbar support.
In vehicles with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side
of the seat.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the
lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback returns to the
upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the
control used to recline them is located on the
outboard side of the seat behind the power seat
control.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of
the control forward.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the restraint up to
raise it. To lower the
Power Lift Seat
head restraint, press the
button, located on the
top of the seatback, and
push the restraint down.
The rear seat head restraints are also adjustable.
To adjust a power lift seat up or down:
1. Move the seat forward or rearward to the
desired position.
2. Press the top or bottom of the power lift seat
switch, located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat, to raise or lower the seat.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, you can fold either side of the
seatback down for more cargo space. Make
sure the front seat is not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To lower the rear seatback, pull on the seat tab
located on the outboard side of the seatback
cushion and fold the seatback down. This allows
you direct access to the trunk.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure
it latches.
{CAUTION:
2. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked in position.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Make sure that the safety belts are properly
stowed over the seatback in all three
positions.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright locked position.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See
page 164.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety
belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
everyone’s protection.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all
times.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down,
squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the
height adjuster
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle. The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without squeezing the
buttons to make sure it has locked into position.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
page 22.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for the following.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Rear Seat Passengers
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the
edge of the seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its storage clip.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then,
place the guide over the belt and insert
the two edges of the belt into the slots of the
guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
page 32. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward
and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if
your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
Child Restraints
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
CAUTION: (Continued)
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of
restraints available for children with special
needs.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 52 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
If you need to secure more than one child restraint
in the rear seat, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint
or the size of the child restraint, you may not
be able to access certain safety belt assemblies or
LATCH anchors for additional passengers or
child restraints.
CAUTION: (Continued)
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configurations for Use of Two Child
Restraints
Configurations for Use of Three Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Occupant prohibited
A. Occupant prohibited
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. No occupant
recommended
C. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,
you must also use either the lower anchors or
the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or
a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a
top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Rear Seat
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each
rear anchor position has a label, near the
crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where the anchors are located.
The top tether anchors are located behind the rear
seat on the filler panel.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
page 49 for additional information.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
If you need to secure more than one child restraint
in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint
on page 49. Depending on where you place
the child restraint, you may not be able to access
certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH
anchors for additional passengers or child
restraints.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the
LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the same
time, but you can install two of them. If you want
to do this, install one LATCH child restraint in
the passenger-side position, and install the other
one either in the driver-side position or in the
center position. Refer to the following illustration to
learn which anchors to use.
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of
child restraints easier. When using lower anchors,
do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead
use the vehicle’s anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to
secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the
proper anchor location.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
instructions and the following steps:
tether over the
seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable head restraint, raise it. See
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint
posts. See Head
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
you are using a dual
tether route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint
posts. See Head
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and see Lower Anchors
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer
place to secure a forward-facing child restraint.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
CAUTION: (Continued)
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a
small child in a forward-facing child restraint
or booster seat is detected. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even
if the airbags are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put
a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger Sensing
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbags are off.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
the child restraint has a top tether.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See Passenger
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator will be lit
and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger. When the safety belt is not in use,
slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing.
The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the
safety belt, near the guide loop.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
{CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver.
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
right front passenger.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver and passenger directly behind the driver.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear
crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
airbag symbol.
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
page 42.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
page 164 for more information.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver
is in the ceiling above the side windows.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger is in the ceiling above the
side windows.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie-down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating airbag will be blocked.
Do not let seat covers block the inflation
path of a side impact airbag. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors, which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and
a more severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less
than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold
level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to
16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for
a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to
40.2 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
The side impact airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck, unless the passenger sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s seat-mounted side
page 77 for more information.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For
side impact airbags, inflation is determined by the
location and severity of the impact.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are
also airbag modules in the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with
roof-mounted side impact airbags, there are
also airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side window.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact airbags.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly
that some people may not even realize an airbag
inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
may still be at least partially inflated minutes after
the vehicle comes to rest. Some components
of the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for
the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s bag, the side of the
seatback closest to the door for the seat-mounted
side impact airbags, and the area along the
ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows for
roof-mounted side impact airbags — may be
hot for a short time. The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There may be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,
and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those
features.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger
airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The
passenger airbag status indicator will be visible
when you start your vehicle in the instrument
panel.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for the airbag system. If you
do not get them, the airbag system will
not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
United States
Canada
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off, will be visible. See Passenger
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag systems. Improper service can
mean that an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer/retailer for service.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of the
passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the
front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even
if the airbags are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbags are off. See Passenger Airbag
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
on page 62.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 13.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build. Everyone in your
vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
Remove any additional material from the seat
cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front
passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the
on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbags are active.
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If
this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag
this, including important safety
information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position
on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,
which helps the passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety
Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a
blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing
system operates. You may want to consider not
using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling
headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,
roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
information.
system. If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the airbag covering on the driver’s and
right front passenger’s seatback, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the
side windows, the bag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module
in the steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, the airbag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,
or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for the roof-mounted side impact
airbag. Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If an airbag inflates, you may also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then the new
assemblies will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage may also mean you may need
to have LATCH system, safety belt or seat
parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH
system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,
even if the airbags have not deployed. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle
has been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle or
while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 164.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace
airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag
system earlier in this section.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
One key is used for the ignition and all locks.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a new vehicle is delivered to the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
dealer/retailer, the key has a key tag. This tag has
a bar-coded key code that tells your dealer/retailer
how to make extra keys. This tag may be
removed and kept by your dealer/retailer. If it has
not been removed, keep the tag in a safe
place. If you lose your key, your dealer/retailer can
easily make another one by using the key code.
for more information.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Your vehicle may have a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) system. The RKE system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any remote keyless entry system.
If the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter
to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,
and the trunk can be opened from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) away with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
Use the following
functions if your vehicle
has the RKE system.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
• If you are still having trouble, see your retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough
outside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps,
parking lamps, and back-up lamps will turn on
each time the unlock button on the transmitter is
pressed. These exterior lamps will stay on for
20 seconds, or until a door is opened. See “EXT
(Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Q(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. The interior lamps will turn off after all of the
doors are closed. If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the remote lock feedback
can be programmed to have the horn chirp
and/or the turn signals flash when the RKE
transmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors. See
“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC
information.
information.
Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
will disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
Pressing the lock button may also arm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content
V(Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold
this button for about one second to open the trunk.
The trunk can be opened with the transmitter
when the vehicle speed is less than 2 mph
(3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.
K(Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining doors unlock.
The interior lamps turn on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If
enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock
feedback can be programmed to have the horn
chirp and/or the turn signals flash when the
RKE transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle’s
doors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”
for more information.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to locate your vehicle. The horn
sounds three times and the headlamps and turn
signals flash three times. Press and hold the
button for about three seconds to initiate the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press the
button again to cancel the panic alarm.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your retailer. Remember to
bring any remaining transmitters with you
when you go to your retailer. Each vehicle can
have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do
the following:
The battery is weak if the transmitter does not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into the
notch located below the vehicle locator/panic
alarm button, and separate the bottom
If the battery is low, a KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
LOW message will display in the vehicle’s DIC.
half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the
new one. Make sure the positive (+) side of
the battery faces up. Use one three-volt,
CR2032, or equivalent, type battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use
care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Put the two halves back together. Make sure
the cover is on tight, so water will not get
inside the transmitter.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A
child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has
one. Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock
the door.
From the inside, lock and unlock the door by
moving the manual lock knob down and up, or by
using the power door lock switches.
CAUTION: (Continued)
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s door.
This feature allows the driver to delay the locking
of the vehicle. It will not operate with the key
Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock all
doors. Press the inboard side of the switch to
lock all doors.
Press the driver’s power door lock switch or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock
button once. With the key removed from the
ignition and the driver’s door open, the following
occurs:
The rear doors do not have power door lock
switches. Rear seat passengers must use
the manual lock knob on their doors.
• Three chimes sound to signal the delay.
Door Ajar Reminder
• All doors will lock and the turn signals flash
once five seconds after the last door has
been closed.
If one of the doors is not fully closed while the
ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:
• The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is
enabled. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 187.
• A chime will sound.
• The DOOR AJAR message will display
through the Driver Information Center (DIC)
until the door is closed. See DIC Warnings and
If a door is opened before the five seconds has
elapsed, the doors do not lock until five seconds
after all doors are closed.
If the power door lock switch or the transmitter
lock button is pressed twice when leaving
the vehicle, the doors lock immediately.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter
unlock button is pressed, the doors unlock
immediately and do not lock automatically after
the doors are closed.
When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P),
all doors will unlock.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the
doors are locked, have that person use the manual
lock knob or power door unlock switch.
This feature is turned on at the factory but may
be turned off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 187
The power door unlock function can be
programmed through prompts displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). These prompts
allow you to choose unlock settings. See DIC
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Your vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock all
doors automatically when the following are met:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
This feature cannot be disabled.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door
manual lock, using the power door lock switch,
or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot
Security Lock Label
shown
and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.
The rear doors must be open to access them. The
label showing lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
{CAUTION:
This feature prevents the driver’s door from being
locked using the power door locks, if the key is
left in the ignition and a door is open.
It can be dangerous to drive with the
trunk lid open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System.
Press the power door lock switch to lock all the
doors and then unlock the driver’s door.
Press and hold the power door lock switch for
more than three seconds to override this feature.
If the key is removed from the ignition, or if
the manual door lock or the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is used, the key could still be
locked inside the vehicle. Always remember
to take the key with you.
Trunk
To open the trunk from the outside, press the
trunk release button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Press the button located
on the driver’s door
near the map pocket to
open the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is
in PARK (P).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle. The emergency
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located inside the trunk on
the trunk latch. This handle glows following
exposure to light. Pull the release handle up to
open the trunk from the inside.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The driver’s window has an express-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front of
the switch part way, and the driver’s window opens
a small amount. If the front of the switch is
pressed all the way down and released, the
window goes all the way down automatically.
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest on the
driver’s door. In
addition, each
passenger door has a
switch for its own
window.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the
front of the switch momentarily. To raise the
window, pull and hold the front of the switch.
Express-Up Window
Your vehicle may have this feature on the driver’s
window. Pull the switch up to the second
position and release the switch to activate the
express-up feature. To stop the window as
it is raising, pull up or press down briefly on the
switch again.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming the Power Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need
to reprogram the driver’s power window for
the express-up feature to work. Replace or
recharge the vehicle’s battery before
reprogramming.
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window stops at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory
position. Weather conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to auto-reverse.
The window returns to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
To program the driver’s window, follow
these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC, ON, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until
the window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the
window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up for
approximately two seconds after the window
is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Window Lockout
The driver’s power window controls also include a
lockout button.
{CAUTION:
o(Window Lockout): Press the lockout button
to stop the rear passengers from using their
window switches. The driver and front passenger
can still operate all the windows with the lock
on. When the red part of the switch is visible you
have returned to normal window operation.
If express override is activated, the
window will not reverse automatically.
You or others could be injured and the
window could be damaged. Before you
use express override, make sure that all
people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the
visors. You can also remove them from the center
mount and swing them to the side, to block out
glare from the side.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position.
The window rises for as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released, the express mode
is re-activated.
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver’s side
visor. When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.
In this mode, the window can still close on an
object in its path. Use care when using the
override mode.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming the System
Theft-Deterrent Systems
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by
pressing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter lock button.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
The system will arm thirty seconds after all the
doors are closed, or sixty seconds with any
door open.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a
second time while all the doors are closed, the
system will arm immediately. The system will still
arm in sixty seconds if a door is open. When the
open door is closed, the system will arm.
Your vehicle may have
a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security
light will flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second,
this means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, lock the car
with the lock levers on the doors.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disarming the System
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition to ON.
To turn off the system alarm:
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will
stop flashing.
transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This
will also disarm the system.
How the System Alarm is Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
• Open the driver’s door or trunk. This will
cause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed
by a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
If you hear three chirps when the unlock or lock
button is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means
that the content theft security system alarm was
previously triggered.
• Open any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for
thirty seconds.
• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote
start feature, it will activate the full alarm.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder in
your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not
have to do anything special to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you insert or remove
the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the
vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does
not start and the security light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on, the key may have a
damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be not damaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
does not start with the other key, your vehicle
needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first
key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a
new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will
not start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON position within five seconds of the
original key being turned to the OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key
has been programmed.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder
to “learn” the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If your vehicle was first sold in Canada, or if all
the currently programmed keys are lost or do not
operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes
on and stays on, you may be able to restart
your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+
system, however, is not working properly and
must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the
vehicle.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that
is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates
the system.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Do not exceed 5,000 engine rpm. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and windshield wipers
while the engine is not running.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the
ignition switch, you can
turn it to four different
positions.
Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or
towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.
R(ON): This position unlocks the ignition. It
is also the position to where the key returns after
you release the switch and the engine starts.
The switch will stay in this position while the
engine is running. But even while the engine is not
running, you can use ON to operate the electrical
accessories, and to display some instrument
panel warning lights.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or
break the key. Use the correct key and turn the
key only with your hand. Make sure the key
is in all the way. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACC or ON position with the engine off.
You might not be able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/(START): This position starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch will return to the ON position
for normal driving.
9(OFF): This is the only position from which
you can remove the key. It also locks the ignition
and transaxle. A warning chime sounds if the
driver’s door is opened while the ignition is off and
the key is left in the ignition.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key In the Ignition
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime sounds, when the driver’s door is
opened. Always remember to remove the key from
the ignition and take it with you. This locks your
ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Heated Seats (if equipped)
• Sunroof (if equipped)
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The battery could be drained if the key is left in
the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You might
not be able to start your vehicle after it has
been parked for an extended period of time.
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof
will work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver’s door
is opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists
in starting the engine and protects
Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop)
components. If the key is turned to the
START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine continues
cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and
the key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking stops after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC or LOCK position.
The shift lever must be in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) for the vehicle to start. To restart
when the vehicle is already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift
into PARK (P) only when your vehicle is
stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed
goes down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and transaxle gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transaxle gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your retailer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop
feature. After the engine is started and has
reached operating temperature, the AUTO STOP
feature may cause the engine to turn off when
you apply the brakes and come to a complete
stop. When you take your foot off the brake pedal
or press the accelerator pedal, the engine will
start. The engine will continue to run until the next
AUTO STOP.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
{CAUTION:
Exiting your vehicle, without first shifting
into PARK (P), may cause the vehicle to
move, you or others may be injured.
Because your vehicle has the Automatic
Engine Start/Stop feature, your vehicle’s
engine might seem to be shut off,
The AUTO STOP symbol on the tachometer
signifies that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode.
information. When the vehicle is turned off, the
tachometer will move to OFF. If the driver’s door is
opened while in AUTO STOP mode, a chime
will sound.
however, once the brake pedal is
released, the engine could start up again.
Shift to PARK (P) and turn the ignition to
OFF, before exiting the vehicle.
To restart the engine during the AUTO STOP,
release the brake pedal or press the accelerator
pedal. The engine starts immediately. The
vehicle continues to run until the next stop.
There are several conditions which may prevent
an AUTO STOP or cause an AUTO START.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Engine Will Remain Running When:
The Engine Will Restart When:
• The brake pedal is released.
• The accelerator pedal is applied.
• The engine, transaxle, or hybrid battery is
not warmed up yet.
• The outside temperature is approximately
• When shifting out of DRIVE (D) to any
other gear.
−4°F (−20°C).
• When the A/C is in Normal Mode.
• If the A/C button is selected, the duration of
the AUTO STOP will depend on the outside
temperature. This economy mode improves
fuel economy by limiting the effects of the air
conditioning. The warmer it is outside, the
shorter the time before the engine is restarted
to provide cabin cooling.
• A/C is in Hybrid Mode and the climate control
system is working to cool the vehicle. See
page 154 for more information.
• Defrost is selected.
• The shift lever is in PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N),
REVERSE (R), INTERMEDIATE (I) or
LOW (L).
• The climate control system is turned from Off
to On (econ or normal A/C, or floor/
defog/defrost) See Automatic Climate Control
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low.
• The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or
loads are high.
• The hood is not fully closed.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The engine is required to run for either heater
or climate control performance. See “Air
Conditioning Engine Start/Stop” under
page 154 for more information.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have this feature. In very cold
weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can provide easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also
have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the
cord. This will prevent operation of the engine
coolant heater when the temperature is at or above
0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low and
requires recharging.
• Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
retailer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the
best advice for that particular area.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The engine coolant heater cord is
located near the air cleaner box on the
passenger side of the engine compartment.
page 264 for more information on location.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
There are several
different positions for
the automatic transaxle.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start the
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You
have to fully apply the regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before shifting
from PARK (P) while the ignition key is in RUN. If
you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) while maintaining brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine
while your vehicle is already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when
your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive
gear while your engine is running at high
speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transaxle. It provides the best fuel
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power
for passing, and you are:
The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is
in INTERMEDIATE (I). See Starting the Engine
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 110
for more information.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually
using the brakes. It can be used on very
steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift
into LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
• Going above 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
The engine will not Auto Stop when the shifter is
in LOW (L). See Starting the Engine (Automatic
information.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle
speed without using your brakes for slight
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to the steepness of the grade.
If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used
to prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might
choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D)
when driving on hilly, winding roads, so that
there is less shifting between gears.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If
you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking
brake to hold the vehicle in place.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also
appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
remind you to release the parking brake. See DIC
Parking Brake
To set the parking
brake, push down the
parking brake pedal with
your left foot. If the
ignition is on, the brake
system warning light
will come on. See Brake
on page 168.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is off
before driving.
Regenerative Braking
Your vehicle has a regenerative braking system.
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy
from the moving vehicle and turns it back
into electrical energy. This energy is then stored
back into the vehicle’s hybrid battery system,
contributing to increased fuel efficiency.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down
momentarily on the parking brake pedal with
your left foot until you feel the pedal release. If the
parking brake is not released when you begin to
drive, the brake system warning light will be
on and a chime will sound warning you that the
parking brake is still on.
The system works whenever you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal while your vehicle is
moving in a forward gear. This causes your vehicle
to slow down slightly faster. It may feel like the
brake pedal is being pressed, even when it is not.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing
the button on the shift lever while pushing the
shift lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle can put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transaxle. It could be difficult to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set
the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you might need to have
another vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill
to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, this should let you pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and the parking brake is firmly set before leaving
it. After moving the shift lever into PARK (P),
hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if
you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pushing the shift lever button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not
fully locked in PARK (P).
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system.
To shift out of PARK (P):
1. Apply the regular brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press
the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from
PARK (P), consult your dealer/retailer.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
has been modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
{CAUTION:
There is something about your vehicle that
can make it move suddenly, and you or
others can be seriously injured. This can
happen if the vehicle is in the Auto Stop
mode, and the shift lever is in DRIVE (D).
Because your vehicle has the Automatic
Engine Start/Stop feature, your vehicle’s
engine might seem to be shut off when you
come to a complete stop. However, if you
then start to exit the vehicle, as soon as
you take your foot off the brake pedal, the
engine will start again and the vehicle can
move forward. If you are going to exit your
vehicle, first shift to PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to LOCK. Then exit.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving
position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly
behind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to
move it up or down and side to side. The day/night
adjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid
glare from the lamps behind you. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving
position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly
behind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to
move it up or down and side to side. The day/night
adjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid
glare from the lamps behind you. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe
more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
page 120.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the selector switch located above the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right
outside mirror. Then press the control pad to move
the selected mirror in the desired direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
housing.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your
vehicle.
Outside Power Mirrors
Heated Outside Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors
are located on the inside
of the vehicle near
If your vehicle has this feature, the surface of the
outside mirrors will heat when the rear window
defogger is activated. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Automatic Climate Control
the driver’s side mirror.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
are included in the vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber
glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button to
speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® System
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by
contacting OnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner’s
Guide and the OnStar® Terms and Conditions
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe &
Sound® Plan
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
(AACN) (If equipped)
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
(1-888-466-7827).
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
How OnStar® Service Works
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
page 206 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cupholder(s)
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever.
Close the glove box with a firm push.
There are two removable cupholders and
additional storage areas located at the rear of the
shift lever. To access, push the button and the
cover will slide back automatically. To close, slide
the cover forward and lock into place.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a center console with two
storage areas. To access the upper tray storage,
lift the passenger side lever. To access the
lower storage area, lift the driver side lever.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net located
on each side of the trunk to help keep small
loads, like grocery bags, in place during sharp
turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
Pull down the door on the back of the center
console to use the rear seat cupholders.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A deflector will automatically raise when the
sunroof is opened. The deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a
sunroof, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the map
lamps.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch
and hold it until the sunroof is closed. The
sunroof will stop if the switch is released. Close
the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or
closed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of
the sliding glass panel, damage will occur
and the sunroof may not open or close
properly. Always close the glass panel before
closing the sunshade.
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is
in ON or in ACC, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Press the back of the switch and release it to
open the sunroof to the vent position. From the
vent position, press and release the back of
the switch to express-open the sunroof. To stop
the sunroof from express opening, press the switch
again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof opens past the
vented position.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
page 160.
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
page 206.
page 108.
D. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever. See
M. Automatic Climate Control System. See
page 154.
Control Button. See Electronic Stability
F. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See
G. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
on page 116.
page 145. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 179.
page 192.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the
police and others that you have a problem. The
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them
up at the side of the road about 300 feet
(100 m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
towards the center of
the instrument panel.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. The steering
wheel can be raised to the highest level to give
your legs more room when you enter and exit the
vehicle.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
The lever that lets you tilt and telescope the
steering wheel is located on the left side of the
steering column.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down
the lever. Then move the steering wheel up or
down or backward or forward into a comfortable
position. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
page 142.
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while
driving.
page 142.
page 148.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions
let you signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to
high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward the front of the vehicle.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
returns automatically to the normal position.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on if the high
beam lamps are turned
on while the ignition
is on.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low
beam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rear
of the vehicle.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever returns
by itself when it is released.
If the arrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all as
you signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulb
could be burned out and other drivers will not see
your turn signal.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you until the high-beam headlamps
come on, then release the lever to turn them off.
Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid an
accident. Also, check the appropriate fuses. See
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x(Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with
this symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or
longer delay between wiping cycles. To the left
of the adjust band are bars, increasing in size from
bottom to top, that indicate the frequency of the
wipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement is
less frequent. Larger bars mean the movement
is more frequent.
Windshield Wipers
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the
first setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at
low speed.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the
steering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the
second setting past intermittent, for wiping
at a high speed.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to
turn off the windshield wipers.
8(Mist): Move the lever all the way down to
this position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there
until the windshield wipers start; then let go.
The windshield wipers stop after one wiping cycle.
If additional wiping cycles are needed, hold the
lever down longer.
&(Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers):
Move the lever to this position for intermittent or
speed sensitive operation. The amount of
delay time varies between wiping cycles due to
the delay setting selected or the speed of the
vehicle.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Damaged wiper blades can prevent you from
seeing well enough to drive safely. Clear ice and
snow from the wiper blades before using them
to prevent damage.
Windshield Washer
To wash the windshield, press the button at the
end of the lever until the washers begin.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades
do become damaged, get new blades.
{CAUTION:
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
If the motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off,
clear away the snow or ice, and then turn the
wipers back on.
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
When the button is released, the washers stop,
but the wipers continue to wipe about three times
or resume the previous speed.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on
for more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps
turn on automatically. They turn off 15 seconds
after the wipers are turned off.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets you maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
the steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
I (On/Off): Press I to turn the cruise control
system on and off.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RES+ (Resume): Press RES+ to resume a set
speed and to accelerate the speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired
speed and then apply the brakes. This disengages
the cruise control. The cruise symbol in the
instrument panel cluster also goes out indicating
cruise is no longer engaged. To return to the
previously set speed, you do not need to
go through the set process again. Once the
vehicle is at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can briefly press the RES+.
SET− (Set): Press SET– to set a speed and to
decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The
indicator light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise
symbol displays in the instrument panel
cluster to show the system is engaged.
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously
chosen speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• If the cruise control system is already
engaged, press the RES+. Hold it there until
you reach the desired speed, and then release
the button.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control automatically disengages.
When road conditions allow, the cruise control
can be used again.
• To increase the vehicle’s speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then
release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the brakes are applied this turns off the
cruise control. Many drivers find this to be
too much trouble and do not use cruise control on
steep hills.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Push and hold the SET− until the desired
Ending Cruise Control
lower speed is reached, then release it.
There are two ways to disengage the cruise
control:
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
push the SET−. Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise
control disengages, the cruise symbol in the
instrument panel cluster goes out.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruise
control system.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle slows down to the previous cruise
control speed that was set earlier.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased,
when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills
depends upon the vehicle’s speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep
hills, you might have to step on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn the
band to this position to automatically turn on
the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime, and
the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps
at night.
Headlamps
P(Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this position only works when a vehicle is in
the PARK (P) position.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn
the switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the
switch to off/on again. This is a momentary control
switch that springs back when released. The
Automatic Headlamp System always turns on at
the beginning of an ignition cycle.
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the
steering column operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
Headlamps on Reminder
2(Headlamps): Turn the band to this position
to turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the
ignition while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a
warning chime.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this
position to turn on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps Off in PARK (P)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature works when the ignition is ON and it
is dark outside. To turn the headlamps off
when it is dark outside but keep other exterior
lights on, turn the exterior lamp control to
the parking lamp position. In this position, the
parking lamps, sidemarker lamps, taillamps,
license plate lamps and instrument panel lights
are on, but the headlamps are off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL are helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional DRL are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada. The vehicle has
a light sensor on top of the instrument panel that
controls the DRL. Make sure it is not covered,
or the head lamps will be on when they are
not needed.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other
lamps when it is dark outside, turn the exterior
lamp control to the AUTO or headlamp position.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the
following conditions are met:
This feature will not work for Canadian vehicles.
Delayed Headlamps
• The ignition is on.
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the
headlamps on for 20 seconds after the key is
turned to OFF, then the headlamps automatically
turn off.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The exterior lamps control is in the parking
lamps only position (This applies only to
vehicles that are first sold in Canada).
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp
feature while it is active turn the turn
signal/multifunction lever up one position and then
back to AUTO.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The parking brake is released or the vehicle is
not in PARK.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, parking lamps, and instrument
panel lights are not on unless you turn the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
and automatic headlamp systems will only be
affected when the light sensor sees a change in
lighting lasting longer than this delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when they are needed.
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it takes
about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside.
During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may
not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness
page 151.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such
as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, and
the instrument panel lights. The radio lights
will also be dim.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, turn the ignition on and set the
exterior light switch to the off/on position. For
Canadian vehicles, the transmission must stay in
PARK (P) for this function.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel that controls the automatic
headlamp system. Make sure it is not covered or
the automatic headlamp system will be on
when it is not needed.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamps when they are needed.
There is a delay in the transition between the
daytime and nighttime operation of the DRL and
the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
Your vehicle might have a dome lamp without a
switch. If the dome lamp has a switch, the
following are the settings.
The control for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn
the lamp off, even when a door is open.
1(Door): Move the lever to this position so that
the lamp comes on when a door is opened.
+(On): Move the lever to this position to turn
the dome lamp on.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any
door is opened. These lamps fade out about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed
or when the ignition is turned to ON. They also
go on when you press the unlock symbol button or
the horn symbol on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) system transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from
the ignition to provide light as you exit.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parade Dimming
Battery Run-Down Protection
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that
comes on while the parking lamps are turned
on during the day. It prevents the display lights and
indicator lights from being dim, while the parking
lamps are used during the day.
Your vehicle has a battery run-down feature
designed to protect the vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, or
dome lamp) is left on when the ignition is
turned off, the battery run-down protection system
automatically shuts the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This prevents draining of the battery.
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the
following:
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the
overhead console. These lamps come on when
the doors are opened if the lamp switch is
not in the OFF position. Press the side of each
lamp to turn them on and off, while the doors are
closed.
• Open any door.
• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button.
• Press the power door lock switch.
• Press the remote trunk release.
Overhead Ambient Lighting
These lamps will automatically turn on and off as
controlled by the light sensor located on top of
the instrument panel.
• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and then
to on again.
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is open
and turns off when it is closed.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your retailer for
additional information on the accessory power
outlet.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
There are two accessory power outlets. One
accessory power outlet is inside the center storage
console and the other is located on the center
storage console below the climate controls.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle can damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational
at all times.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged
in for an extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is
always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug
electrical equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum 20 ampere rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are climate control settings that use
more fuel:
Climate Controls
• Normal air conditioning mode.
• The defrost mode.
Automatic Climate Control System
You can automatically control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation in your vehicle.
• Extreme temperature settings, such as 60°F
(15°C) / 90F (32°C).
• High fan speed settings.
The following can help reduce fuel consumption:
• Use of the full automatic control method as
described under Automatic Operation.
• Use hybrid air conditioning, instead of the
normal air conditioning.
• Select a temperature setting that is higher in
hot weather and lower in cold weather.
• Only use defrost to clear the windows.
Climate Control Influence on Hybrid
Operation and Fuel Economy
These suggestions will help to reduce fuel
consumption, but may reduce overall comfort.
The climate control system is dependent upon other
vehicle systems for heat and power input. Certain
climate control settings can lead to higher fuel
consumption and/or fewer Auto Stops.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
setting as necessary. If the temperature is set
at 60°F (15°C) the system remains at the
maximum cooling setting. If the temperature is
set at 90°F (32°C) the system remains at the
maximum heat setting. Choosing either
maximum setting does not cause the vehicle to
heat or cool any faster.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan
speed knob and the air delivery mode knob to
activate the automatic system. When automatic
operation is active the system controls the
inside temperature and air delivery.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
full automatic control:
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel near the
windshield. This sensor regulates air
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the
AUTO position.
temperature based on the intensity of the sun.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the
lower right side of the climate control
faceplate, as this regulates the inside
temperature.
The current set temperature displays. When
AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet is automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor
runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air
inlet can automatically switch to recirculate
inside air to help quickly cool down your
vehicle.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in
cold weather, the system delays turning on
the fan until warm air is available. The length
of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Turning the fan knob overrides
this delay and changes the fan to the selected
speed.
2. Set the temperature.
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is
recommended. Allow about 20 minutes for the
system to regulate. Press the w or x arrow
temperature buttons to adjust the temperature
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
6(Floor): Use this mode to direct most of the
air to the floor outlets with some air directed to the
side window outlets.
The air delivery mode or fan speed, can manually
be adjusted.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
Fan Speed Knob
9(Off): Select this position to turn off the fan.
Outside air still enters the vehicle. The direction
can be changed by changing the mode position.
The temperature can also be adjusted using either
the up or down arrow temperature buttons.
#(Normal Air Conditioning): Press this button
to turn the air conditioning compressor on and
off. A light above the button comes on while the air
conditioning is on.
9(Fan): Turn the knob with the fan symbol to
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO
mode, the system runs the air conditioning
automatically to cool and dehumidify the air
entering the vehicle.
manually adjust the fan speed.
w x Temperature Control: Press the w and
x arrows to increase or decrease the temperature
inside the vehicle.
While in this mode, the hybrid system does not
shut the engine down at complete stops.
Air Delivery Mode Knob
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let
hot inside air escape. This reduces the time it
takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then
keep your windows closed for the air conditioner
to work its best.
H(Vent): Use this mode to direct air to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): Use this mode to direct half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets, and the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual
operation of the automatic system, use bi-level to
deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to
the instrument panel outlets. To warm or cool the
air delivered, press the temperature buttons to
the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies
the air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO
mode, the system maximizes its performance by
using recirculation as necessary.
h (Recirculation): Press the button to turn on
the recirculation mode. The air inside the vehicle
recirculates through the climate control system and
the vehicle, not from outside your vehicle. This
mode is helpful when trying to limit odors
from entering the vehicle and for maximum air
conditioning performance in hot weather. When the
button is pressed, an indicator light above the
button comes on. The recirculation indicator light
blinks three times if recirculation is used in a
mode in which it cannot function. Only use this
mode when it is needed for comfort, since window
fogging rapidly occurs if the air conditioning
compressor is not engaged.
Heating: On cold days when using manual
operation of the automatic system, use floor mode
to deliver air to the floor outlets. To warm or
cool the air delivered, push the temperature
buttons to the desired setting.
Press this button to cancel the auto recirculation
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the
system reverts to the auto recirculation function.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to
AUTO and adjust the temperature by pressing the
temperature buttons.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or
floor, the light on the button flashes three times
and then goes out to indicate that this is not
allowed. This is to prevent window fogging.
When the heater is in use, there might be slight
noise or vibration during Auto Stops. This is due to
the coolant circulation pump that continues to
circulate heat through the system during the
engine Auto Stop.
The heater works best if the windows are kept
closed.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of
time can cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows.
To clear the fog, select either defog or defrost.
Make sure the air conditioning is on. Allow the air
conditioning to run automatically to help
dehumidify the air.
Maximum Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the
following:
N (Hybrid Air Conditioning): The hybrid A/C
function tries to balance fuel economy and air
conditioning comfort. When hybrid A/C is used in
warm weather, your vehicle gets better fuel
economy and/or more frequent autostops at the
expense of cabin cooling performance compared
to normal air conditioning.
1. Select the C vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select # air conditioning.
4. Select the h recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of
time may cause the air inside of your vehicle
to become too dry. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,
turn the recirculation mode off.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two
modes to choose from to clear fog or frost from the
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light above
the button comes on to show that the rear
window defogger is activated.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the
button is pressed. If additional warming time is
needed, press the button again.
-(Defog): Turn the mode knob to this position
to select the defog setting, which delivers air to the
floor and windshield outlets. Use this setting to
clear the windows of fog or moisture.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains
on once the button is pressed.
0(Defrost): Turn the mode knob to this position
to defrost the windshield. The system automatically
controls the fan speed if defrost is selected from
the AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F
(4°C) or warmer, the air conditioning compressor
automatically runs to help dehumidify the air
and dry the windshield. The air conditioning
indicator light blinks three times if the compressor
is turned off while in this mode.
If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the
surface of the outside mirrors also heat when the
rear window defogger is activated. See Outside
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
The engine will not perform Auto Stops when the
defrost mode is on.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Tips
Outlet Adjustment
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into your vehicle.
There are four main air outlets on the instrument
panel. Use the lever located in the center of
each outlet by moving it either side-to-side or up
and down, to change the direction and amount
of airflow in the vehicle. The center thumbwheel
does not control the main outlets.
• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors
as they could adversely affect the performance
of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
Dedicated Rear Seat Air Outlet
For vehicles with this feature, the dedicated rear
seat air outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel above the two main center
outlets. This outlet is aimed to provide comfort to
the rear seat passengers, especially while
using air conditioning in warm weather.
• When an objectionable odor outside the
vehicle is encountered, use the recirculation
mode, with the temperature knob at a
comfortable setting to prevent the odor from
entering the vehicle through the ventilation
system. This can be helpful when driving
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this mode in cold
or cool weather can cause window fogging.
Use the thumbwheel in the center of the outlet to
turn the airflow on or off. This can be adjusted
to improve front seat passenger comfort if
there are no rear seat passengers. The direction
of airflow cannot be adjusted since it is directed
towards the rear seat passengers.
Do not attempt to move the horizontal vent vane,
as breakage can occur.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
on your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So
please get to know your vehicle’s warning
lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights
and gages could also save you or others from
injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the details show on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If
you are familiar with this section, you should
not be alarmed when this happens.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You
will know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need
to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are
explained on the following pages.
United States version shown, Canada Similar
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
for more information.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United
States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle
needs a new odometer installed. If the new
one can be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it is
set at zero and a label must be put on the
driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Your vehicle has auto stop and the indicator for
this is on the tachometer. For more information see
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime
will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts, unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several
seconds, then it will
flash for several more.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have
driven since you last reset it.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
information.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag
symbol. The system checks the airbag’s
electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells
you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
Several seconds after the key is turned to ON or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
page 77 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled
(may inflate).
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag. A
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag. See Passenger Sensing
important safety information.
Charging System Light
The charging system
light will come on for a
few seconds when
you turn on the ignition
as a check to indicate
it is working.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your retailer for service.
If the light stays on, or comes on while you are
driving and you hear a chime, there could be
a problem with the electrical charging system. This
could indicate that there is a loose generator
drive belt or another electrical problem. Have it
checked right away. Driving while this light
is on could drain the battery and result in the
engine and headlights suddenly shutting off.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the airbags. See Airbag
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio,
air conditioner and heater fan.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two
times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle
page 247.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If the
light comes on and the chime sounds when
you are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have antilock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you do
not have antilock brakes and there is a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
The ABS warning light will come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
Your vehicle may have
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS).
This light will come on when your engine is started
and may stay on for several seconds. This is
normal.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
If your vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), this light may
come on for the
following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the TC
(traction control) button located on the center
console, the light will come on and stay on. To
turn the system back on, press the button again
and the warning light should go out.
This light will also come on when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
A CHECK TIRE PRESS DIC message will
accompany the light, see DIC Warnings and
• If there is a brake system problem that is
specifically related to traction control, the TCS
will turn off and the warning light will come on.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do
so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
If the traction control system warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of
time when the system is turned on, your vehicle
needs service.
This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn
on solid if a problem is detected with the Tire
Pressure Monitor system. See Tire Pressure
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Stability Control Indicator
Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Your vehicle may have
the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system.
This light indicates that
the engine coolant has
overheated or the
radiator cooling fan is
not working.
You may feel or hear the system working, this is
page 219 for more information.
This light will come on briefly when you turn on
the ignition as a check to show you it is working.
If the light comes on and the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving conditions, pull off
the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
When the ESC indicator light is on and either the
SERVICE ESC or ESC OFF Driver Information
Center (DIC) message is displayed, the system will
not assist the driver to maintain directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
page 182 for more information.
information.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well, your vehicle’s
fuel economy might not be as good, and the
engine might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that might not be
covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause
this light to come on. Modifications to these
systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to make sure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This can prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and could damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service might be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A
loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of
water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be
wet. The condition is usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed. You might notice this as stalling
after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or
stumbling on acceleration — these conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up. This
will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced the battery or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or
electrical problems that might have developed.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on and you will
hear a chime when you
are driving.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil. The engine could be low on oil,
or could have some other oil problem. Have it
fixed immediately.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light will come on briefly when you turn on
the ignition as a check to show you it is working. If
it does not come on with the ignition on, you
may have a problem with the bulb. Have it fixed
right away.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information
regarding this light, see
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
page 142 for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is
more information.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem
with your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a
corner or speed up.
United States
Canada
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you
have left, when the ignition is on. When the
indicator nears empty, a LOW FUEL message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information. You still have a little fuel left,
but you should get more soon. The arrow on
the fuel gage points to side of the vehicle with the
fuel door.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Stop Mode
Charge/Assist Gage
The charge/assist gage
displays the charge
(current) into and out of
the battery.
United States
Canada
This mark on the tachometer shows that the
engine is in Auto Stop mode which is a fuel saving
operation.
When the electric motor is assisting the engine as
in a maximum acceleration, the needle will move to
the Assist range. When the electric motor operates
as a generator to perform regenerative braking
while decelerating, the needle will move to the
page 119 for more information. The needle will also
move into the Charge region if the hybrid control
system deems it is an efficient time to charge the
hybrid battery. If the hybrid battery or other hybrid
components are very hot or cold, the Charge and
Assist functions may be suspended until the
component temperatures are normal.
When the ignition key is turned off, the tachometer
needle will drop to OFF. If the driver’s door is
opened while in Auto Stop, a chime will sound.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Economy Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of
your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to
display driver personalization menu modes and
warning/status messages. All messages will appear
in the DIC display, located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster.
If enabled, this light will
come on briefly when
the vehicle is started.
This light will also come on when the vehicle is
operating at a fuel efficient point.
This light can be disabled by using the Driver
Information Center (DIC) buttons. With the engine
off and the key turned to accessory, set the
DIC to the outside air temperature and odometer
mode. Press and hold the reset button for
several seconds. The light will come on solid and
then flash several times and turn off to indicate
it is disabled. Repeat the procedure to enable the
page 182 for more information.
The DIC buttons are located on the left side of the
steering wheel. Your vehicle will have one of
the buttons shown above.
q /INFO (Information): Press this button to
scroll through the vehicle information mode
displays.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some
vehicle information mode displays, select a
personalization menu mode setting, or
acknowledge a warning message.
Information Modes
q /INFO (Information): Press this button to
scroll through the following vehicle information
modes:
Press and hold the information and reset buttons
at the same time for one second, then release
the buttons to enter the personalization menu. See
more information.
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside
air temperature and the odometer display. This
mode shows the temperature outside of the vehicle
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C) and the total distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
The outside air temperature appears on the left
side of the DIC display and the odometer appears
on the right side of the display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The
DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons. The button functions
are detailed in the following.
To change the DIC display to English or metric
units, see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP A or TRIP B
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer
in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both
odometers can be used at the same time.
Press the information button until
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG displays. This mode shows
how many miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is getting
based on current and past driving conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold
the reset button for a few seconds while the
desired trip odometer is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold
the reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is
displayed. Average fuel economy is then
calculated starting from that point. If the average
fuel economy is not reset, it is continually updated
each time you drive.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and
the fuel remaining in the tank.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until
MPG (L/100 KM) INST displays. This mode shows
the current fuel economy at a particular moment
and changes frequently as driving conditions
change. This mode shows the instantaneous fuel
economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW
displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel
range is an average of recent driving conditions.
As your driving conditions change, this data is
gradually updated. The FUEL RANGE mode
cannot be reset.
Under most coast conditions or at an idle stop,
AUTOSTOP displays. This means that the electric
motor is on, the gas engine is off, and the
engine is not using any fuel.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AV (Average) SPEED
COOLANT
Press the information button until AV SPEED
displays. This mode shows the vehicle’s average
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Press the information button until COOLANT
displays. This mode shows the temperature of the
engine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and
hold the reset button while AV SPEED is
displayed.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
OIL LIFE
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is
no longer present. To acknowledge a message
and clear it from the display, press and hold any of
the DIC buttons. If the condition is still present,
the warning message comes back on the next time
the vehicle is turned off and back on. With most
messages, a warning chime sounds when
the message displays. Your vehicle may have
other warning messages.
Press the information button until OIL LIFE
displays. The engine oil life system shows an
estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It shows
100% when the system is reset after an oil
change. It alerts you to change the oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
more information.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
page 268.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
more information.
This message displays if the fuel cap has not
been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make
sure that it is on properly. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn
the message off.
BRAKE FLUID
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
This message displays, while the ignition is on,
when the brake fluid level is low. The brake system
warning light on the instrument panel cluster
also comes on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 168 for more information. Have the
brake system serviced by your retailer as soon as
possible.
This message displays when the tire pressure in
one or more of the tires needs to be checked. If a
tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared
from the display, the engine oil life system
must still be reset separately. See Engine Oil Life
on page 356 for more information.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the cruise control
for more information.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOOR AJAR
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
This message displays if one or more of the
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. Make sure
that the door(s) are closed completely.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), this message displays when ESC is
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
You may feel or hear the system working and
see this message displayed in the DIC. Slippery
road conditions may exist when this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message may stay on for a few seconds after
ESC stops assisting you with directional control
of the vehicle. This is normal when the system is
page 219 for more information.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
retailer immediately.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can
affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If
this message is on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your retailer for service as soon as
possible.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), this message displays and the ESC light
on the instrument panel cluster comes on
solid when ESC is turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Electronic Stability Control
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD AJAR
LOW TRACTION
This message displays if the hood is not fully
closed. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely. The vehicle will not auto stop when
the hood is ajar.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
stays on for a few seconds after the system stops
limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control System
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
LOW WASHER FLUID
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays when the vehicle’s
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield
washer fluid reservoir to the proper level as
soon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 282.
This message displays if the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the
battery in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
POWER STEERING
LOW FUEL
This message displays if a problem has been
detected with the electric power steering. Have
your vehicle serviced by your retailer immediately.
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
information.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
more information.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE HYBRID
This message displays when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your retailer immediately.
This message displays if the hybrid components
need to be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by
your retailer.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays and a chime sounds
when the system is not functioning properly.
The TCS light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. This light stays on solid as long as
the detected problem remains present. When
this message displays, the system is not working.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 170
for more information. Have the system serviced
by your retailer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), this message displays and a chime sounds
if there has been a problem detected with ESC.
The ESC light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. This light stays on solid as long as
the detected problem remains present. When
this message displays, the system is not working.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off and then back on. If this message
still stays on or turns back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
ESC inspected by your retailer as soon as
possible.
SRVC (Service) HILL START
This message displays if there is a problem with
the hill start assist function. Have your vehicle
serviced by your retailer.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change feature settings, use the following
procedure:
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays and the TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when
the system is turned off. Adjust your driving
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is
stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
TRUNK AJAR
2. Press and hold the information and reset
buttons at the same time for one second, then
release to enter the personalization menu.
This message displays when the trunk is not
closed completely. Make sure that the trunk is
information.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph
(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will be
accessible.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
3. Press the information button to scroll through
the available personalization menu modes.
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to a
preferred setting. All of the features listed may not
be available on your vehicle. Only the features
available will be displayed on the DIC.
Press the reset button to scroll through
the available settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten
seconds, the display will go back to the
previous information displayed.
The default settings for the features were set
when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since
that time.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCK HORN
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to
chirp every time the lock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one
second to scroll through the available settings:
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system,
page 180 for more information.
UNITS
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The horn will still chirp on the second press.
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the
vehicle information. When UNITS appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at
least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All
information will be displayed in English units.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will
be displayed in metric units.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLOCK HORN
LIGHT FLASH
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to
chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the
lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on the
RKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at
least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the
unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release
buttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal
lighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk
release buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY LOCK
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When
DELAY LOCK appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
This feature, which allows the vehicle to
automatically unlock certain doors, can be enabled
or disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available
settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You can
temporarily override delayed locking by pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter a
second time.
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically
unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically
unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically
unlock. You will need to manually unlock the
doors.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when
pressing the power lock switch or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter.
page 95 for more information.
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLK (Unlock)
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is
selected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature
determines when the automatic door unlocking
will occur. When UNLK appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS
appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
one second to scroll through the available settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key
is turned off.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
page 95 for more information.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will
turn on when the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE
appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all
information in English.
{CAUTION:
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information in
French.
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information in
Spanish.
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information in
German.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and exit out
of the personalization menu mode.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any
of the following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is
reached.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
Here are some ways in which you can help
avoid distraction while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer/retailer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio
and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see
the date press the H (clock) button while the radio
is on. The date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio
and time display.
Setting the Time
Your vehicle has a radio with a H (clock) button
for setting the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) displays.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once
the time 12H and 24H, and the date
MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels to be changed. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or
the date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \
FWD (forward) button.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
© SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse)
button, or turn the f knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio.
3. Press the H button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
when the information is available. While the radio
is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (MP3)
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press the O(power) knob
to turn the system on and off.
Turn the O(volume) knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as you
speed up or slow down while driving. That way, the
volume level should sound about the same as
you drive. To activate SCV:
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM or
FM. The display shows the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the SEEK arrows to go to
the previous or to the next station and stay there.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired
Speed Compensated Volume setting
(OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level
of radio volume compensation. The display
times out after approximately 10 seconds.
Each higher setting allows for more radio
volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (MP3 and RDS Features): Press
this button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or MP3 song.
A choice of additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can
appear. Continue pressing this button to highlight
the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label displays.
While information is not available, No Info displays.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released again, the station that
was set, returns.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls if the
page 210.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station you
want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be programmed as favorites using the
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
combination of AM or FM stations. To store a
station as a favorite, perform the following steps:
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button
until Manual displays or start to manually adjust the
bass, midrange, or treble by pressing the f knob.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the
f knob until the tone control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward) or
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the f knob until the speaker control
labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can
also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD or s REV button until the desired
levels are obtained.
s REV (reverse) button until the desired
levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is
weak, or has static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category (CAT) Button Option
CD Messages
CAT (Category): The CAT button does not
function in this Hybrid vehicle.
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or
the CD ejects, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
Radio Messages
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your
vehicle and it must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
Locked: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer/retailer while reporting
the problem.
If your radio system has a single CD (MP3) player,
it is capable of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc. For more information on how to play an MP3
page 200 later in this section.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Input Device Found displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
information on driver distraction.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Song title, artist name, and album are available for
display by the radio when recorded using ID3
tags version 1 and 2.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
do additional volume adjustments from the
portable device if the volume is not loud or soft
enough.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compressed Audio
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying
to locate a particular folder during playback.
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3
files. By default the radio reads only the
uncompressed audio and ignore the MP3 files.
Pressing the CAT button toggles between
compressed and uncompressed audio format.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions might
not work).
MP3 Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or
a combination of a large number of files
and folders, or playlists can cause the player
to be unable to play up to the maximum
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play a large number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more space on
the display, potentially getting cut off.
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy
to find songs while driving. Organize songs
by albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc
can cause the disc not to function in the
player.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous
and next folder buttons, the tune knob, or the
SEEK arrows. You can also play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW that was recorded using no file folders.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files,
the player lets you access and navigate up to
the maximum, but all items over the maximum are
not accessible.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
No Folder
When a CD contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder function does not function
on a CD that was recorded without folders or
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is
treated as a folder. If the root directory has
compressed audio files, the directory is displayed
as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders or files.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then go to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four
pages are shortened. The display does not show
parts of words on the last page of text and the
extension of the filename does not display.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, there is no
playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R
or CD-RW should begin playing.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. The new track name displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD-R or
CD-RW is in the player, it stays in the player.
When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R
or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or
CD-RW that is currently playing, press and release
this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If
the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an MP3
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
10 seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To play
MP3 files from a CD-R or CD-RW in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album name
is displayed on the second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing
MP3 files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in
order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album
ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes to
scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can
begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the
background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the
display between the arrows. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist
in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and
begins playing MP3 files by that artist. To listen to
MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton
located below either arrow button. The disc goes to
the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist displays.
To exit the music navigator mode, press the
pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal
MP3 playback.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
They include the following:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate
and LOCKED displays.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
©¨: Press the seek arrows to go to the
previous or the next stored radio station and stay
there. Press and hold the seek arrows briefly
to reverse back to the previous station or
to advance to the next station, with a strong signal
in the selected band.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio cannot
operate if stolen.
While a CD is playing, press the seek arrows to
go to the previous or to the next track. Press and
hold the seek arrows briefly to continue reversing
back or advancing ahead to other tracks within
the disc.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Radio controls are
located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has
this feature, some audio
controls can be
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to
mute the system. Press this button again to
turn the sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®,
press and hold this button for two seconds
to activate voice on the OnStar® system. See the
for more information.
adjusted at this location.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Reception
Care of Your CDs
You might experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
there is interference or static, unplug the item from
the accessory power outlet.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels during the night.
Static can also occur when things like storms
and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on your
radio.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage
the rear window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not clear the
inside rear window with sharp objects.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear
window defogger, located in the rear window.
Make sure that the inside surface of the rear
window is not scratched and that the lines on the
glass are not damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.
Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window
needs to be properly attached to the post on the
glass.
Because this antenna is built into the rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by
car washes and vandals.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear
window defogger is turned on, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged and
the grid line must be repaired.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some
tinting materials will interfere with or distort the
incoming radio reception. Any damage
caused to your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will not be covered
by your warranty.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and
the antenna needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that you do not damage the grid lines
for the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space
between the lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with
resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help
do these things, or pull off the road in a
safe place to do them. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For
persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon four
things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that
the driving skills of many people are impaired at a
BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired
at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is
12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater!
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number
of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”
is not the right answer. What if there is an
emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when
a child darts into the street? A person with even a
moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly
enough to avoid the collision.
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in
a cab; or if you are with a group, designate
a driver who will not drink.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes,
the steering, and the accelerator. All three
systems have to do their work at the places where
the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You might hear
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you might even notice that the
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Antilock Brake
on page 169.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is
especially useful in slippery road conditions. The
system operates only if it senses that one or
both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system
reduces engine power and may also upshift
the transmission to limit wheel spin. You may feel
or hear the system working, but this is normal.
Also, the traction control system activates
the appropriate corner brakes to gain even quicker
control to limit wheel spin. The LOW TRACTION
message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you.
You might hear the antilock pump or motor
operate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TCS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions except PARK (P), NEUTRAL (N) or
REVERSE (R). But the system can upshift
the transmission only as high as the shift lever
position you’ve chosen, so you should use
the lower gears only when necessary. See
To turn the system on or off, press the traction
control button (TC) located on the center console.
In order to effectively “rock” the vehicle, you
will need to turn off TCS.
If you press the TC button once, the TCS will turn
off, the TRACTION OFF message will display and
the TCS warning light will come on. The
StabiliTrak® system will stay on. Press the TC
button again to turn the system back on. The TCS
warning light will go off. If you press and hold the
TC button, the StabiliTrak® system and the traction
control system will turn off. Press the TC button
again to turn StabiliTrak® and the traction control
system back on. For more information, see
This light is located on
the instrument panel
cluster.
When the system is on, this warning light will
come on to let you know if there’s a problem, or if
the system has been turned off. When this light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
When you turn the system off, the TCS warning
light will come on and stay on. If the Traction
Control System is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button to turn the system off, the warning
light will come on – but the system won’t turn off
right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a
current need to limit wheel spin.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the TCS on.
But you can turn the system off if you prefer.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
information.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or
SERVICE ESC message will be displayed in the
DIC. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking during the first two miles
after starting your vehicle, these messages and the
ESC light may also appear. If this is the case,
your vehicle does not need servicing. Turn your
vehicle off and back on again to reset the system.
If the SERVICE ESC message appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), and your vehicle
hasn’t gone through hard acceleration or
Electronic Stability Control
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control systems
and helps the driver maintain directional control of
the vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to
drive away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to ensure there are no problems. You
may hear or feel the system working. This
is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with your vehicle. The system should initialize
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In
some cases, it may take approximately two
miles of driving before the system initializes.
braking in the first two miles, your vehicle should
be taken in for service.
When the ESC off light is on and either the
SERVICE ESC or ESC OFF message is displayed,
the system will not assist the driver to maintain
directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 182
The ESC light is located
on the instrument panel
cluster.
The traction control part of ESC can be turned off
or back on by pressing the ESC button. To
disable both traction control and ESC, press and
hold the button briefly.
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF message will first appear followed by the ESC
OFF message. The ESC OFF and TCS OFF
indicator lights will also appear to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the ESC
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the wheels (engine
speed management) and by applying brakes to
each individual wheel (brake-traction control)
as necessary.
It is recommended to leave the system on
for normal driving conditions, but it may be
necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is
stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want
to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may
also be necessary to turn off the system when
driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
The traction control system is enabled
automatically when you start your vehicle, and it
will activate and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
If you turn off traction control, the TCS OFF
warning light will come on and the TRACTION
OFF message will be displayed The ESC system
will remain operational unless it is turned off.
For more information on the traction active
page 179.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. The ESC
OFF and SERVICE ESC messages and the
ESC OFF light will be on solid to warn the driver
that ESC is disabled and requires service. If
the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your retailer for
page 182.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the ESC, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE ESC message
are displayed, you could damage the transfer
case. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
information.
Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the
power steering assist system will continue
to operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.
If you lose power steering assist because the
electric power steering system is not functioning,
you can steer, but it will take more effort.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt
upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this
happens, you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.
This is normal.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction
several times until it stops, or hold the steering
wheel in the stopped position for an extended
amount of time, you may notice a reduced amount
of power steering assist. The normal amount of
power steering assist should return shortly after a
few normal steering movements.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC ACTIVE message will appear
and the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to use cruise
again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
The electric power steering system does not
require regular maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems, contact your
dealer/retailer for service repairs. See DIC
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your retailer for service.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
much of those places. You can lose control. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 217
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
speed.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
the front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one
factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 214. It is better to remove as much speed
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are
always possible is a good reason to practice
defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts
properly.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder
while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a
brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on
collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
an outside convex mirror makes the vehicle you
just passed seem farther away from you than it
really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
and do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it might be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They might cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, slow down and
keep more space between you and other
vehicles.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try
to slow down before you hit them.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through the engine’s air intake
and badly damage the engine. Never drive
through water that is slightly lower than the
underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid
deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
{CAUTION:
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
CAUTION: (Continued)
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use your turn signal.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
course, you will find experienced and able
service experts at dealers/retailers all across the
United States and Canada. They are ready
and willing to help if you need it.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of
the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and
the rush of the wind against the vehicle that
can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!
If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in
less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then here are some tips:
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• You might want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
can offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, and
need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it
will improve your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. But you can turn the
TCS off if you ever need to. You should turn
the TCS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,
mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
you have TCS, slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain
conditions, you might want to turn the TCS off,
such as when driving through deep snow
and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion
at lower speeds. See Traction Control System
on page 219.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
page 215.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
can appear in shaded areas where the
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
around you. If you do not have blankets
or extra clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice
ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try
not to brake while you are actually on the
ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
For information about using tire chains on your
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn off any
traction or stability system. See Traction Control
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. To
prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels
stop spinning before shifting gears. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight
it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that could free
your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out
after a few tries, it might need to be towed
out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information label
lists the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Item
Total
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to tow
any trailer.
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Consult your retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
page 377.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy
towing, towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground, and dolly towing, towing your
vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at
the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel
stop for about five minutes. This will ensure proper
lubrication of transmission components.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you will want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front
following these steps:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse
5. Turn the ignition key to ACC.
6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse
once you have reached your destination.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing
your vehicle.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear
could damage it. Also, repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Never have your
vehicle towed from the rear.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the
ignition key.
Dolly Towing
To tow your vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and a dolly:
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-Saturn accessories to your
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with it. We hope you
will go to your retailer for all your service needs.
You will get genuine Saturn parts and
Saturn-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle
all Saturn.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
Saturn accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your
vehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.
When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask for
Saturn accessories, you will know that
Saturn-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine Saturn
accessories.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
{CAUTION:
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,
many parts and systems (including some inside
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
Doing Your Own Service Work
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
{CAUTION:
Never try to do your own service on
hybrid components. You can be injured
and your vehicle can be damaged if you
try to do your own service work. Service
and repair of these hybrid components
should only be performed by a
Saturn-trained service technician with the
proper knowledge and tools.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you might notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine
needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, Saturn recommends the
use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). Saturn recommends against the use
page 256 for additional information.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
your authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your retailer has additives that will help correct
and prevent most deposit-related problems.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. We recommend that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier. However, E85
(85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to
your retailer for service.
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling the Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the
law in some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the
center of the rear edge of the fuel door and it will
pop open.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring
back to the right.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), the CHECK GAS CAP message will be
displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and
then something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
page 335.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can
get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may cause your
malfunction indicator lamp to light and may
damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping
gasoline.
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood
release handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located
inside the vehicle to
the left of the
steering column.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push
the secondary hood release handle toward
the driver side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue
to open to the full position. Before closing the
hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the strut is reduced, then release the
hood to latch fully. Check to make sure the
hood is closed and repeat the process if
necessary.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
page 278.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See ″Brake
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
on page 264 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, you need to add at least one
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This
symbol indicates that
the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will
page 182. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can
be unhealthy for your skin and could even
cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your
skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash
or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing
used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
After changing the engine oil and filter, the system
must be reset. To reset the oil life system:
1. With the CHANGE OIL SOON message
displayed, press either of the DIC buttons
to clear the CHANGE OIL SOON message.
page 182.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local
recycling center for help.
2. Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC.
3. Press and hold the ENTER button for at least
one second. An ACKNOWLEDGED display
message will appear for three seconds or until
the next button is pressed. This will tell you
the system has been reset. See DIC Vehicle
4. Turn the ignition to OFF.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the
cover on.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
2. Lift off the cover.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using alignment tab.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
5. Install cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn
the cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the
cover is properly seated.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid
level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to
the retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
(−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
year, have your dealer/retailer check your
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
page 365 for more information.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the
rear of the engine compartment.
for more information on location.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
but only when the engine is cool. If the surge tank
is empty, a special fill procedure is necessary.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature
warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Just
turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious
problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to do
so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and
get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
If the overheat warning is no longer on, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on,
you can drive normally.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the
FULL COLD mark on the front of the coolant surge
tank. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the
FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This allows
any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch
out for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower than the FULL COLD mark, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant
surge tank until the level reaches the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer/retailer, if necessary.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark on the
front of the surge tank. Wait about five
minutes, then check to see if the level is
below the FULL COLD mark. If the level is
below the FULL COLD mark, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to the mark.
Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the FULL COLD mark for at
least five minutes.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Overview on page 264
for reservoir location.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
the vehicle’s windshield washer system
and paint.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If
you add fluid when the linings are worn, there will
be too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
on page 264 for the
location of the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you should
have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later the brakes will not
work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the
BRAKE FLUID message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) displays. See DIC Warnings and
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
example, just a few drops of mineral-based
oil, such as engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let
someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 335.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not
work well. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads
have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
can come and go or be heard all the time
your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque
page 351.
{CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does
not return to normal height, or if there is a
rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality brake parts. When you replace
parts of the braking system — for example, when
the brake linings wear down and you need
new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes
might not work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between the front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
around a battery without getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Your vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a
36-volt hybrid battery system.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system
should be serviced only by a qualified facility
to avoid battery system damage. See your
dealer/retailer if service is needed.
12-Volt Battery
When it is time for a new standard 12-volt battery,
see your dealer/retailer for one that has the
replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label.
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over
two months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be
permanently damaged.
36-Volt Battery System
If you need a new 36-volt hybrid battery system,
see your dealer/retailer.
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat,
in the trunk. If the vehicle is stored for an
extended period of time, drive the vehicle every
two months for about half an hour to keep
the 36-volt hybrid battery charged and in good
working condition.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
30 days or more, you should disconnect the
standard 12-volt battery by disconnecting
the negative battery cable, the one that is exposed.
Remember to reconnect the battery when you
are ready to drive your vehicle.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal
locations on each vehicle. Your vehicle’s
positive (+) terminal is located under a
red tethered cap on the battery. The
negative (–) terminal is located under a black
tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
information on location. Flip the caps up to
access the positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals.
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
don’t, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the
negative (−) cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminals to their original
positions.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
A. Turn Signal Lamp C. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp D. Sidemarker Lamp
If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced,
see your dealer/retailer.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp, or
a back-up lamp:
5. Remove the taillamp assembly.
6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
more information.
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle
has one.
8. Pull the bulb from the socket.
9. Install a new bulb.
3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim.
10. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall the
taillamp assembly.
4. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
921
License Plate Lamp and Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
168
Turn Signal Lamp
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer/retailer.
1. Remove the two screws holding the license
plate lamp assembly to the fascia.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 356 for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. Here is how to
remove the wiper blade:
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector
and make sure the grooved areas are fully set
in the locked position.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away
from the windshield.
For the proper type and size, see Normal
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of
the blade, and turn the blade assembly away
from the arm connector.
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with
your vehicle.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
recommended pressure.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 315.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the Tire Size
illustration later in this section for more detail.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that
load. For information on recommended tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
75, as shown in item C, of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as
high as it is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows, an example of, a
typical passenger car tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 304.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 242.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 311.
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
Check your tires once a month or more.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure levels. Sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with
a tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure
telltale when one
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
or more of your tires is
significantly
under-inflated.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light
on the instrument panel cluster, and at the same
time the CHECK TIRE PRESS message appears
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light on the
instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE
PRESS message displays at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about
a low tire pressure condition but it does not
replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire
page 298.
Notice: Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). Use only the
GM-provided tire sealant. Other liquid tire
sealants may damage the tire pressure
sensors.
The tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more
of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.
See your Saturn retailer for service if all TPMS
sensors are installed and the TPMS error message
comes on and stays on.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
for an example of the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of
the TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the
identification codes need to be matched to the
new tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched,
to the tire/wheel positions, in the following order:
driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your Saturn
retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold both the Lock and Unlock
buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, at the same time, for
approximately five seconds or until you hear
the horn sound twice.
4. The horn sounding twice indicates the
receiver is ready to learn the TPMS sensors.
The driver side front turn signal comes on
indicating that corner’s sensor is ready to be
learned.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s
pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To
decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed
end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
about eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take
up to 30 seconds to sound. It sounds one
time and all the turn signals flash one time to
confirm the sensor identification code has
been matched to the tire/wheel position.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process
stops and you need to start over.
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. The passenger side front turn signal comes
on to indicate that corner’s sensor is ready to
be learned. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry and Science Canada.
8. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on
to indicate that corner’s sensor is ready to be
learned. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
9. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner’s sensor is ready to be
learned. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning process is done.
Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
1. This device may not cause interference.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance” for additional information.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the tire and loading information label and
its location on your vehicle.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence when you need
new tires.
{CAUTION:
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following
statements are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,
page 299 for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time. This is
true for the spare tire as well, even if it is not being
used. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will
typically wear out before they degrade due to age.
If you are unsure about the need to replace
your tires as they get older, consult the tire
manufacturer for more information.
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information label. This
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label.
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use Saturn specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
Saturn certified technician.
additional information.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle
pulling to one side or the other, the alignment might
need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire clearance to the body
and chassis.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new Saturn original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the
wheel nuts might come loose and the
wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
Saturn original equipment wheel.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to become loose and even come off. This
could lead to a crash. Be sure to use the
correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace
them, be sure to get new Saturn original
equipment wheel nuts.
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and
no place to store a tire.
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires
tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But, if
you should ever have a blow out, here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you
or others may be injured in a crash.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,
and then gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the front tires.
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blow out,
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a
nail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit
may be used to repair the damaged tire
temporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
After repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,
take your vehicle to an authorized retailer to have
the tire inspected and repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place
and stopping. Then do this:
Tire Inflator Kit
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly
and put the shift lever in PARK (P). See
additional information.
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jack
or spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant
and air at the same time to seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read
and follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or
has damaged sidewalls or large tears that
allow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility. See
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The kit includes:
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a
nail or other similar road hazard, use the tire
inflator kit to temporarily repair the damaged tire.
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire
inflator kit, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of
driving to have the tire inspected and repaired.
If the sealant is not removed from the tire
within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving, it is
more likely that the tire can get damaged and have
to be replaced.
A. Air Compressor D. On/Off Switch
B. Tire Sealant
Canister
C. Air Compressor
E. Air Pressure Gage
F. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
Accessory Plug G. Sealant Filling Hose
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
Tire Sealant
To access the tire inflator kit:
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected
into a flat tire, can temporarily repair nail holes
or cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant
cannot repair tire damage caused while driving
on a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out”, or
a tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.
The tire sealant solution is to be used for a single
tire and can only be used once.
more information.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the
sealant canister. The sealant might not be as
effective beyond the expiration date. If needed, see
your dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
2. Remove the tire inflator kit strap by turning
the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. Remove the inflator kit from its foam container.
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Tire Inflator Kit
To use the tire inflator kit:
1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and
unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the unit. To do this, pull the top portion
of the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,
and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert the
plug into an accessory outlet yet.
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire
by turning it counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated
the tire, do not remove it.
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire
valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is in
the O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)
into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
for more information.
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 110
for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on)
position.
The inflator kit forces sealant and air into the
tire. Sealant could leak from the puncture
hole until the vehicle is driven and the
hole has sealed.
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the sealant
filling hose by looking at the air pressure gage.
If there is not a pressure reading while the
compressor is running, the connection between
the inflator kit and the tire is bad.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot
be reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. Damage to the
tire is severe and the sealant will not be
effective. Remove the air compressor plug
from the accessory power outlet and unscrew
the inflating hose from the tire valve. See
Check the attachment between the sealant
filling hose and the tire valve stem.
10. Push the inflator kit switch to the O (off)
position once the correct tire pressure is
obtained.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure, found on the Tire and
Loading Information label located on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below the
vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit.
11. Turn off the engine.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high
while the compressor is on. Turn the
compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading.
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug
from the accessory power outlet in the
vehicle.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended
inflation pressure,
remove the
maximum speed
label from the
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the
tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,
and replace the tire valve stem cap.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they could be hot after usage.
sealant canister.
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the
windshield or to the face of the radio/clock.
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back
in the air compressor. To do this, wrap the air
compressor accessory plug, snap in the
plug, and then push in the bottom and then
the top of the wrapped air compressor
accessory plug.
The maximum speed label reminds you
to drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tire
inspected and repaired.
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)
to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
Stop at a safe location and check the
tire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under
“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”
next in this section. If the tire pressure
has fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), below
the recommended inflation pressure, stop
driving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for
the sealant to work. See Roadside Assistance
17. Return the equipment to the proper storage
location in the trunk of your vehicle. Turn
the wing nut clockwise to secure the
tire inflator kit.
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire:
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the air compressor.
19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with local
state codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with
a new canister from your dealer/retailer.
20. After temporarily repairing a tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your
vehicle to your dealer/retailer to have the tire
inspected and repaired.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the
sealant canister by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
{CAUTION:
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
more information.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See
7. Push the inflator kit switch to the I (on)
position.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the air
compressor hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running, the
connection between the inflator kit and
the tire is bad.
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 110
for more information. The vehicle must
be running while using the air compressor.
Check the attachment between the air
compressor hose and the tire valve stem.
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure using the air pressure gage
on the top of the unit.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the
switch to the O (off) position.
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and
wrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in
the trunk of your vehicle.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose
from the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in
the air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the
compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See
your dealer/retailer for more information.
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your retailer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean, use the following instructions:
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
residue completely. You can get approved
cleaning products from your retailer. See Vehicle
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry
the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter your vehicle.
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your
vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces.
Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your Saturn retailer. See
Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. You can help to
keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your
vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum Wheels
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass
cleaner.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if you do not wash your
vehicle after driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust. Always
wash your vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,
sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments
may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper
blades if they are worn or damaged.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your Saturn
retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your Saturn
retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body and
paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one easy step.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor
overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will
stop until the motor cools. If the overload is
caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
components from working as they should.
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse
opens protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers and fusible links. This greatly
reduces the chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in
the center of the instrument panel, one in the
engine compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument
panel fuse block. It can be used to easily remove
fuses from the fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, on the lower
portion of the instrument panel near the floor.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block,
then remove the fuse block cover to access the
fuses.
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and features listed.
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
POWER
MIRRORS
NOT INSTALLED Not Used
Usage
Fuses
REAR WIPER
POWER
WINDOWS
Usage
Not Used
Power Mirrors
Power Windows
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
Heating Ventilation Air
Conditioning Control (Ignition)
RUN/CRANK
HVAC CTRL (IGN)
Heating Ventilation Air
Conditioning Blower - High Speed
Relay
Instrument Panel Cluster, Theft
Deterrent System
OnStar®
Heating Ventilation Air
HVAC BLOWER
HIGH
HVAC BLOWER
DOOR LOCK
ROOF/HEAT
SEAT
Conditioning Blower Switch
Door Locks
CLUSTER/THEFT
ONSTAR
Sunroof, Power Windows
NOT INSTALLED Not Used
NOT INSTALLED Not Used
NOT INSTALLED Not Used
AIRBAG (IGN)
Airbag (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air
Conditioning Control Diagnostic
Link Connector (Battery)
Adjustable Pedals
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Ignition Switch
AIRBAG (BATT)
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Airbag (Battery)
HVAC CTRL
(BATT)
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
PEDAL
WIPER SW
IGN SENSOR
STRG WHL
ILLUM
NOT INSTALLED Not Used
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
FUSE PULLER
Steering Wheel Illumination
Spare Fuse Holder
Fuse Puller
RADIO
Audio System
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
Interior Lamps
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and features listed.
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver side of the engine compartment, near the
battery.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep
the covers on any electrical component.
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Air Conditioner Clutch
Electronic Throttle Control
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) IGN
Transmission, Transmission Control
Module Ignition 1
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) Pumps
Emission
Left Headlamp Low-Beam
Horn
Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Left Headlamp High-Beam
Right Headlamp High-Beam
Engine Control Module BATT
Windshield Wiper
Fuses
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
41
Usage
Body Control Module 1
Body Control Module Run/Crank
Rear Electrical Center 1
Rear Electrical Center 2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Body Control Module 2
Starter
Electric Power Steering
Transmission Control Module
Battery
Ignition Module
Injectors
Daytime Running Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamps
Driver Power Window
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS) BATT
Transmission Pump Motor
Battery Voltage Sense
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
42
43
44
46
47
50
51
52
54
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(IGN 1)
Engine Control Module (IGN 1)
Cooling Fan 1
15
16
17
18
Cooling Fan 2
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Blower
19
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Relays
28
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
29
30
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
31
Starter
32
33
Run/Crank, Ignition
Powertrain
34
35
37
Air Conditioning Clutch
High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
38
39
40
48
Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wiper 1
Windshield Wiper 2
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Stoplamps
49
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the
trunk of the vehicle. Access the fuse block
through the trunk panel on the driver’s side of the
rear cargo area.
53
Transmission Pump Motor
Diodes
Usage
27
Wiper
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Passenger Seat Controls
Driver Seat Controls
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
Belt Alternator Starter (BAS)
Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming
6
7
8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
9
10
Usage
Relays
26
27
28
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Park Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Sunroof Controls
Not Used
11
12
Not Used
29
Not Used
13
14
15
Audio Amplifier
Heated Seat Controls
Not Used
30
31
32
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, XM™ Satellite Radio
33
34
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Not Used
Trunk Release
Rear Defog
35
36
37
Not Used
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
38 (Diode)
Cargo Lamp
Heated Mirrors
Fuel Pump
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
8.1 qt
7.0 qt
7.7 L
6.6 L
Transaxle (Bottom Pan Removal)
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5.0 qt
4.7 L
16.3 gal
100 lb ft
61.7 L
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
5
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week. Or
you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements. So
please read the following and note how you
drive. If you have any questions on how to keep
your vehicle in good condition, see your Saturn
retailer.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If
you have any doubt, see your retailer to
have a qualified technician do the work.
page 254.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
Saturn retailer do these jobs.
page 356 should be performed when indicated.
information.
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your
service needs, you will know that Saturn-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine Saturn parts.
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see
page 387.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
service technicians who will perform this
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine Saturn parts.
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
page 268 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II might be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
message comes on within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
•
•
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service only). See
footnote (h).
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (m).
•
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and
wiper blades, if contaminated. Replace wiper
blades that are worn or damaged. See Windshield
Wiper Blade Replacement on page 297 and
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 337 for
more information.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect electric power
steering cables for proper hook-up, binding,
cracks, chafing, etc.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. The
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with
genuine parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges
and latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid
hinges and latches. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer/retailer perform this service. See
Engine Coolant on page 272 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if
needed.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require
changing.
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailer
can assist you with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. See
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper
level can cause damage to the engine not
covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
page 119.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it
starts.
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your Saturn retailer for service.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your Saturn retailer for
service.
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever
position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Key Lock
Cylinders
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Engine Oil
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Door Hinges
Canada 109435474).
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 272.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in
Weatherstrip Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Conditioning Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Engine
Coolant
Hydraulic
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Brake System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
Saturn retailer.
ACDelco® Part
Part
Part Numbers
Numbers
A1627C
PF457G
41-103
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
22676970
12605566
12598004
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 23.6 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21.0 inches (53.0 cm)
15779416
15779415
—
—
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is
under a higher tension than the engine drive belt
on a non-hybrid vehicle and requires the use
of a special kind of tool to service. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional
assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance
Center team member will handle your call and
assist in providing product and warranty
information, the nearest retailer location, roadside
assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are
committed to providing our customers with
unparalleled service, before, during, and after the
purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.
Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction
or the operation of your vehicle are resolved by
your retailer’s sales or service departments. If, for
any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take the
following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This
17-digit number can be found on the
vehicle registration or title, on the upper driver
side corner of the dash, or on your roadside
assistance key card.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer
Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail
management team has the authority and the desire
to resolve your concerns. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at this level.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail
facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
372
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of charge
and your case is generally heard within 40 days. If
you do not agree with the decision given in your
case, you can reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and
its retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the
additional assistance of a neutral party through
our voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitration
program called Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program
is available at no cost to you, our customer.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other factors. Saturn
Corporation reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or
you may write to:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns
have been addressed after following the procedure
outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties,
Saturn has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance
Center.
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or to a conventional
Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in
Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, customers may call the
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada
may call 1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S.,
call 1-800-553-6000;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-833-6000).
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require for your vehicle such
as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
The offer is available for a limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-6000.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up to a
maximum of $100.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels
are not provided through this service.
no charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you
detailed, computer personalized maps,
highlighting your choice of either the most
direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along
with helpful travel information pertaining to
your trip.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.
To ensure security, the driver must present
personal identification before lock-out service
is provided. In Canada, the vehicle registration
is also required.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited
to six per calendar year.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn
retailer for warranty service or in the event of
a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be
covered. However, any cost for parts and labor
for non-warranty repairs are the responsibility
of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you might qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle
to be repaired.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when
calling, please provide the following to the
Roadside Assistance Representatives:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for
trip interruption expense assistance.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate
number of the vehicle
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There
could be times when Roadside Assistance
cannot provide timely assistance. Your advisor
may authorize you to secure local emergency
road service, and you will be reimbursed up
to $100 upon submission of the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) and delivery date of
the vehicle
• Description of the problem
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included
in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
Saturn helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options. Depending
on the circumstances, your retailer can offer you
one of the following:
Courtesy Transportation
Shuttle Service
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating retailers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper
(Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada)
and extended powertrain warranty in both the
U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination
with minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one-way or round trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance parameters
of the retailer’s area.
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and
may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the
retailer’s shuttle service, the expense must be
supported by original receipts and can only be up to
the maximum amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle
service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
expenses may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts. See your retailer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every retailer. Please
contact your retailer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
retailer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions
described herein at its sole discretion.
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement
will be limited and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign and complete
a rental agreement and meet state/provincial,
local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related
failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and
safety performance can be compromised in
subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was originally
built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best
choice to assure that your vehicle’s designed
appearance, durability, and safety are preserved.
The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain
your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer may
have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair center that has
GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle
with comprehensive and collision insurance
coverage. There are significant differences in
the quality of coverage afforded by various
insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies
provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle
by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance,
we recommend that you assure your vehicle will
be repaired with GM original equipment collision
parts. If such insurance coverage is not available
from your current insurance carrier, consider
switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in
an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure
you are all right. If you are uninjured,
make sure that no one else in your vehicle,
or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident
until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts
you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties
involved in the accident. Do not discuss
your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the accident.
This helps guard against post-accident
legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that
assures repairs with Genuine GM Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be
charged at the end of your lease for poor
quality repairs.
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you need roadside assistance,
call GM Roadside Assistance.
• If possible, call your insurance company
from the scene of the accident. They will
walk you through the information they need.
If they ask for a police report, phone or
go to the police department headquarters
the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws,
a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and
both vehicles are driveable.
on page 377 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know
where the towing service is taking it.
Get a card from the tow truck operator or
write down the driver’s name, the service’s
name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information
and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility
for your vehicle. Whether you select a
Saturn retailer or a private collision repair
facility to fix the damage, make sure you
are comfortable with them. Remember,
you will have to feel comfortable with their
work for a long time.
• Gather the important information you need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description
of the damage to the other vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work
will be performed on your vehicle. If you
have a question, ask for an explanation.
Reputable shops welcome this opportunity.
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Discuss this with your repair professional, and
insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to
have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to the facility
that any required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts are not covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the repair
and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you
must live with the repair. Depending on your
policy limits, your insurance company may
initially value the repair using aftermarket parts.
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it could order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your retailer
or Saturn Corporation.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them
at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, please
notify Saturn.
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you.
Saturn service manuals are written for trained
technicians, and in some cases, specialized
tools and equipment are necessary to complete
certain repairs. However, the manuals are
available to owners who either have the training,
or wish to gain a greater understanding of the
technical aspect of their Saturn.
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999,
or write:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available
by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain
to the proper use and care of your vehicle.
Some describe costly repairs. Others describe
inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with
the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins
and as described below is applicable only in the
fifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia,
and only for cars and light trucks with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of
individual bulletins are also at your participating
Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair
a new or unexpected condition. Others describe
a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a
small number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer
or a qualified technician may have to determine
if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.
To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn
Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
In Canada, information relating to product
service bulletins can be obtained by contacting
your Saturn retailer.
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors
product performance in the field. We then
prepare bulletins for servicing our products better.
You can get these bulletins, too.
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the
vehicle’s performance and how it is driven. For
example, your vehicle uses computer modules
to monitor and control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the conditions for
airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash
and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These
modules may store data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you operate
the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption
or average speed. These modules may also retain
the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
Saturn will not access this data or share it with
others except: with the consent of the vehicle
owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent
of the lessee; in response to an official request
of police or similar government office; as part
of Saturn’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that Saturn collects or receives may also
be used for Saturn research needs or may
be made available to others for research purposes,
where a need is shown and the data is not tied
to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
OnStar
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to
the OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar®
Terms and Conditions for information on data
on page 127 in this manual for more information.
390
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation System
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has a navigation system,
use of the system may result in the storage
of destinations, addresses, telephone
numbers, and other trip information.
Please refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for
functions such as tire pressure monitoring and
ignition system security, as well as in connection
with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle
transmitters for garage door openers. RFID
technology in Saturn vehicles does not use or
record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 289
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 242
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressure Cap .............................................. 275
Radios (cont.)
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 109
Safety Belts (cont.)
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
